Canon | POWERSHOT A810 | User guide | Canon POWERSHOT A810 User guide

Canon POWERSHOT A810 User guide
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺃﻳًّﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LD/CB-2LDE‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) AA‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫‪WS-800‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ،ImageBrowser EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪) DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬ﺹ ‪.(٣٠‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Adobe Reader‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .PDF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ Microsoft Word/Word Viewer‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Word‬‬
‫)ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻸﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDHC‬‬
‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪*SDXC‬‬
‫* ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺆﺳﺴﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻮﺯﻋﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﻮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺗﺒﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺘﻨﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Canon‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺳﻮﺩﺍء‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻠﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) i :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‪) j/‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) k :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪) g/‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) a/‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪/(Macro) e‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪n‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) h‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) l‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪/‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‪) j/‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) i :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ّ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) k :‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ(‪) g/‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢ ٣ ٤‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) A‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) a/‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ(‪/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪/(Macro) e‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) 1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) h‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪/‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪) l‬ﻋﺮﺽ(‪/‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪n‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻟﺘﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ p‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪FUNC./SET‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ :(xx‬ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﺸﻴﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻜﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪ A4000 IS‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ‪ PowerShot A4000 IS‬ﻭ‪PowerShot‬‬
‫‪A4050 IS‬‬
‫‪ A3400 IS‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A3400 IS‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ A2400 IS‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A2400 IS‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ A2300‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A2300‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ A1300‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A1300‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪ A810‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A810‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ‪ PowerShot A4000 IS‬ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪٣ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ‪٣ ............‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪٧ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪٩ .................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪١١ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ‪١٥ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪٢٤ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪٣٠ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪٣٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٣٨ ............................................‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ‪٧٣ .................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٧٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ‪٧٨ ................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪٨٥ ........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٨٨ .............................. iFrame‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٨٩ .................................G‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٩٠ ........ (G‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٩٠ ..........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٩٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪٩٨ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٠٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪١٠٨ ......................................‬‬
‫‪١‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٤٥ ........................‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١١٣ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪٤٦ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪٤٧ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ‪٤٨ .............................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪٤٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٥٠ ....................................... FUNC.‬‬
‫‪٥١ ..............................................n‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪٥٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١١٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ ‪١١٧ ......................‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١١٩ .............................‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢١ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٢ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٣ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪١٢٤ ...............................‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٥٣ .............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪٥٤ ................. Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪٦٢ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٦٨ ............................‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‪٧١ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٧٢ .............................‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪١٢٩ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪١٣٠ ...................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‪١٣٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ‪١٤٠ ........‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪١٤٠ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٤٣ .......................‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤٨ .......................................‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ ‪١٦١ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١٦٢ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦٦ ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٦٨ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪١٧٢ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪١٨١ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١٨٢ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٥٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ( ‪٧٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‪٧٦ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ‪٩٩ ،٧٤ ،٥٤....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪٦٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ )ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ‪٨٥ ،٦٣............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ )ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪٦٧ ...................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪١١٤...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ‪١٢٠...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪١٤٣................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٣٠ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪١١٨ ،١١٧ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٢.......................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ E‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪٨٨ ،٥٩...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١١٤.....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٤٨.....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪٣٣ ..................................................................‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻚ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ :‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻞ ﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻠﻪ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻀﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺒﺼﺮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﺧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺘﻜﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎء ﻏﺰﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻜﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻄﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺘﻌﺪﻯ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻒ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺼﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻜﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺠﻠﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺮﺑﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺳﻲ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻤﺎءﺍﺕ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ )ﺹ ‪ .(٢‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﺑﻂ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ) (‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻮﻁ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﺼﻤﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻋﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ) ( ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪CB-2LD‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫(‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :CB-2LD‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ :CB-2LDE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LDE‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺪﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫) ( ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) (‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺸﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‬
‫( ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻭﺍﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )‬
‫( ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺤﻪ )‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ AA‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ NiMH‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ AA‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪.(١٤١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺪﻭﻡ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ NiMH‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )ﻷﺳﻔﻞ(‪ .‬ﺃﺯﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﺴﺎﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻖ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٢١‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻴﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢١‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ ،(١٤٠‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٤٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺪﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.n‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ qrop‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) i‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ m‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.o‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٢‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻐﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .r‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،A‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫)ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻭﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ‪.DIGITAL CAMERA Manuals Disk‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﻬﻢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﻋﻤﻘﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ‪.ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫• ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Windows‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫‪Windows Vista SP2‬‬
‫‪Windows XP SP3‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ( ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٫٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ﻭ‪ Core 2 Duo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ١٫٦٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ(‪ ٢ :‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪) Windows 7‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ( ﻭ ‪) Windows Vista‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٦٤‬ﺑﺖ ﻭ‪ ٣٢‬ﺑﺖ(‪:‬‬
‫‪١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪ ٥١٢ :Windows XP‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭ‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ٤٤٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ*‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ x ١،٠٢٤‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows XP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪ Microsoft .NET Framework 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫)ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪(RAM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.6‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ( ﻭﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻀﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬
‫‪ ١٫٨٣ Core Duo‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫‪USB‬‬
‫‪ ٥٥٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ‪ ٧٦٨ × ١،٠٢٤‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.6‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺤﻈﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ )ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪) (CAMERA Solution Disk‬ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﻬﻞ[ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺜﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ .‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ )ﺹ ‪ (٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻀﻊ‬‫ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﻴﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.6‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ ،[CameraWindow‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬
‫‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ ،Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،XP‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera using Canon CameraWindow‬ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ [Canon Camera Window‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[ ]‪[Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪.[CameraWindow] [CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Macintosh‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪) Dock‬ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ؛ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪CAMERA‬‬
‫‪Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١*CB-2LD/CB-2LDE‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١*NB-11L‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫‪WS-800‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Windows/‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫‪١*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(AV) AVC-DC400‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC90‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫‪High-Power‬‬
‫‪HF-DC2‬‬
‫‪٢*Flash‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ High-Power Flash HF-DC1 ٢‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺗﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪DR-DC10‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪DIGITAL‬‬
‫‪CAMERA Solution‬‬
‫‪Disk‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) AA‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Windows/‬‬
‫‪Macintosh‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻢ‬
‫‪WS-800‬‬
‫‪١*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪(AV) AVC-DC400‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪High-Power‬‬
‫‪HF-DC2‬‬
‫‪٢*Flash‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪٣*ACK800‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫‪CBK4-300‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻟﺤﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻳﺤﻖ ﻟﻚ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ‪mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪) 5.0 :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 40.0‬ﱠ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ‪(mm‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) 28 :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 224‬ﱠ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ‪mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪) 5.0 :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 25.0‬ﱠ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ( ‪(mm‬‬
‫)ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ‪) 28 :‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( – ‪ 140‬ﱠ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT LCD‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ٧٫٥‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٢٣٠،٠٠٠ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT LCD‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ٧٫٥‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ( )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٢٣٠،٠٠٠ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT LCD‬ﻣﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ٦٫٨‬ﺳﻢ )‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ٢٣٠،٠٠٠ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ Design rule for Camera File system‬ﻭﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪) DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪Exif 2.3 (JPEG) :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MOV :‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ،H.264‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪) Linear PCM‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ((‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Hi-Speed USB‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC90 AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪٣٨‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) AA‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ NiMH‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪٢x ((Canon NB-3AH) AA‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪) CA-PS800‬ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪(ACK800 AC‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ ،DR-DC10‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤٫٣ x ٥٦٫٣ x ٩٥٫٣‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٢١٫٣ x ٥٦٫٣ x ٩٤٫٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪A2400 IS (CIPA‬‬
‫‪ ٢٠٫١ x ٥٤٫٢ x ٩٤٫٤‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٨ x ٦١٫٧ x ٩٤٫٧‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪ ٢٩٫٨ x ٦١٫٣ x ٩٤٫٧‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪ ١٤٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ١٤١‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٦‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١١٠‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪ ١٢٥‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠٩‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪ ١٧٤‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢٦‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪ ١٧١‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٢٣‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ١٧٥ A4000 IS‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٨٠ A3400 IS‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ A4000 IS‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ A3400 IS‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٩٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢١٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ(*‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٧٥٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪NiMH‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١،١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ*‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ*‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺰﻭﱠﺩﺓ(*‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪NiMH‬‬
‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪَﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ً‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﻄﺔ ‪Camera & Imaging Products‬‬
‫)‪.Association (CIPA‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ(‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫)ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪16M/4608x3456‬‬
‫‪1903‬‬
‫‪7684‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪8M/3264x2448‬‬
‫‪3721‬‬
‫‪15020‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(*‬
‫‪4M/2304x1728‬‬
‫‪6638‬‬
‫‪26792‬‬
‫)ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪(٢‬‬
‫‪2M/1600x1200‬‬
‫‪12927‬‬
‫‪52176‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫‪40937‬‬
‫‪165225‬‬
‫‪2531‬‬
‫‪10219‬‬
‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ( ‪4608x2592‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٤٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪١٨‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪١‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ٢٨‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ١٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪٣‬‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ*‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ٥٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ١٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫*‪ ٢٧ ١‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٢٨‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪.iFrame‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪.iFrame‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ Speed Class 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻢ – ‪ ٣٫٠‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٠ – ١٫٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻻﺗﺴﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‪(j‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪(i‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻢ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٫٢‬ﻣﺘﺮ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪*e‬‬
‫‪ ٥٠ – ١‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪*u‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪*e‬‬
‫‪ ٦٠ – ٣‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫‪*u‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫* ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ – ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪A2400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٢٫٧‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪ ٠٫٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،A‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫‪ 1/2000 – 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ 1/2000 – 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪) f/9.0 / f/3.0‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ f/18 / f/5.9 ،‬ﱠ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS‬‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺮﺏ(‬
‫‪) f/7.9 / f/2.8‬ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ(‪ f/20 / f/6.9 ،‬ﱠ‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ٣٫٦‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٦٨٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ – ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥٫٢ x ٤٠٫٢ x ٣٤٫٦‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٣‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LD/CB-2LDE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ٠٫٤١ ،‬ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(NB-11L‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ )ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ(‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ ٤٠ – ٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ٢٤٫٣ x ٥٧٫٦ x ٨٥٫٠‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ٥٩ :CB-2LD‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٥٦ :CB-2LDE‬ﺟﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﺒﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺟﺮﺗﻬﺎ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻮﺳﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﺼﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪) .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ( ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٧‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.١٦٨‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.١١٦‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٥ – ١٧٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪m‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٧‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻋﻤﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ ،(4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )‪ ،(1‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٠ – ١٧٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﺃﻭ ‪ r‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٧‬‬
‫‪٥١‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (٥ ،٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٣٣‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (٣٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )ﺹ ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )ﺹ ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٦٣‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( )ﺹ ‪(١٦٣‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ ﻫﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ‬‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٥٢‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪٥٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٦١ ،٥٧‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٨٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺗﻀﺨﻴﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) i‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) j‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ(‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻬﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،3‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺪﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ h‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،A‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻇﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎء‬
‫ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) G‬ﺹ ‪ (٨٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ( ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) G‬ﺹ ‪ (٨٩‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٥٤‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.٥٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪Smart Auto‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫”‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﺔ“(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ*‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ )‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ(‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺮﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A4000 IS‬ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 32x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ A810‬ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.i‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫)ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ً i‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ )ﻣﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٨٩٦ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ )‪ ٢٢٤ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٥٦٠ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ )‪ ١٤٠ – ٢٨‬ﻣﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ] )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.n‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٣‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ [‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ [‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.$‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،٦٣‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ،$‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.n‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.$‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٦٣‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ]ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ[ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ[ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺈﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .r‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫! ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ r‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ (.‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٤‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٨‬‬
‫‪٦٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪ ٥٩٤ × ٤٢٠) A2‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪٤٢٠ × ٢٩٧) A3 – A5‬‬
‫– ‪ ٢١٠ × ١٤٨‬ﻣﻢ(‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺫﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪.١٦:٩‬‬
‫‪ ١٨٠ × ١٣٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ١٣٠ × ٩٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬
‫• ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.R‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺳﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﻮﻥ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﻥ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٢٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ً ٣٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻴﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻳﺼﺎﺣﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺄﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،$‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧١‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”‪) “n‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻀﻲء ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺗﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ 10 – 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٧٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪،o‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ qr‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﻃﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ P‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﻣﺤﻈﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،t‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫)‪ (2304 x 1728‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻫﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ^‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺘﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻔﻮﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ )‪ IS‬ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺰﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺻﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ !‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) A‬ﺹ ‪.(٥٣‬‬
‫‪٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪،‬ﻭ ‪،‬ﻭ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٤‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬ﻭ‬
‫‪،‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺼﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﻠﺼﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻗﺪﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻑ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﱢ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪٨٠‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺸﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.p‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭﺓ )ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ١٢‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٦‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬
‫‪ٍ ٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪٨٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ qr‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.op‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺍﻧﺐ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﻣﺸﻮﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬
‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ .(٩٩‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫]ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻀﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.n‬‬
‫‪٨٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻀﻤﺎﻣﻚ ﻟﻶﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،p‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .m‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )ﺹ ‪ً (٧١‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )ﺹ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٨٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.N‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ٧٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.N‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ) ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻊ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ !‬
‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ )‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪٨٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ .iFrame‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ‪ ،٧٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٧٠‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫• ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪.Apple‬‬
‫‪٨٨‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪G‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‬
‫• ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) G‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫• ‪ :G‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،G‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٩ – ١٧٢‬‬
‫‪٨٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪(G‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻞ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ٧٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.G‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ )ﺹ ‪،(١١١ – ٩٠‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬‫ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ G‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ H‬ﻭ‪ n‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ ،G‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ١/٣‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ -2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ #‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٠‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ &‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪ ،#‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪.qr‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻞ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.r‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ &‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ r‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ & ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٩١‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ & ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﺃﻫﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫‪٩٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٣‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ @‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ً‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥‬‬
‫‪٩٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻐﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ )‪ (tungsten‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺧﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Fluorescent‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٦‬‬
‫‪٩٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ“ )ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪W‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٥٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.W‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٣‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٧١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﺎﻃﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٥‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.W‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫‪٩٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .e‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،e‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.e‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ‪ e‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ،[AiAF‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ [‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ )ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .u‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪،u‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.u‬‬
‫‪٩٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ،[AiAF‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٠٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺜﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻲء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺛﻮﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٨‬‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ )ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪) “AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪١٠١‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ً‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﻱ ﻟﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ )ﺹ ‪ (١٠٣‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ‪ e‬ﻭ‪.u‬‬
‫• ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .q‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٢‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻘﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ً‬
‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.4‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٣‬‬
‫‪١٠٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ) ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﺒﺎﻳ ًﻨﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺒﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.%‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪%‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ %‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،r‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ h‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬
‫‪ Z‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻨﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫! ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺗﺪﺍﺑﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٩١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.r‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ (؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ r‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٥‬‬
‫• ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٩١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٠٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٦٢‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٠٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ،[AiAF‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ً‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ،[AiAF‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ً‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٢‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٠‬‬
‫‪١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺧﻄﻮﻁ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [IS‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،4‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) m‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ*‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪) “IS‬ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١١١‬‬
١١٢
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﻭﺗﺼﻔﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫• ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.r‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١١٤‬‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺆﻗ ًﺘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪،1‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ‪op‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.١٧٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺴﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪ .(A‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺴﻄﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 4‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫‪١١٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ g‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪.k‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ qrop‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ k‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﺮﺷﻴﺤﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻠﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.qr‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻰ ‪ 100‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻰ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.qr‬‬
‫‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ k‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ .g‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.qrop‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .m‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ .qr‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪m‬‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻭ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻤﺮﻛﺰﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ^ ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪١١٩‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪[...‬‬
‫ﺑﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ .qr‬ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.qr‬‬
‫‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟ َﻌ َﺮﺿﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ .m‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٣ ،١٣٢‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.o‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻦ ً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٩٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٦ – ١٢٤‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .n‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ (٦٨‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻛـ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﺌﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٢٤‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺧﺎﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ٍ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء[‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) 1‬ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ qrop‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻴﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٢٧‬‬
١٢٨
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫‪١٢٩‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ .3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺣﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻜﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ p‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪ .(١١٤‬ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .o‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٧٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) FUNC.‬ﺹ ‪ .(٥٠‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪qr‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﻄﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﻠﻦ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻨﺴﺨﻬﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،١٣٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫( ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.qr‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ qrop‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٣٢‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ً‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ”ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٣٢‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ )‪ (9999 – 0001‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢،٠٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 9999‬ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء‬
‫ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.((١٣٢‬‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻳﻮﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﺪﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ .(٤٦‬ﻭﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ[ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺿﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ :‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ qrop‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،m‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.n‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫• ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٣٧‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٤‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ )ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪] 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٢‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪] 3‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٢‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬‫ﻭ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫‪١٣٨‬‬
‫[ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٣‬ﻭ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٣‬‬
‫[ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣‬ﻭ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ[ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﺑﻔﺎﻋﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬
‫‪١٣٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﱠﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪o‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ o‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺎﻡ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LD‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-11L‬‬
‫‪١٤٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK-DC90 AC‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ACK800 AC‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ DR-DC10‬ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪DR-DC10‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪CBK4-300‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ NiMH‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ AA‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )‪ (NB-3AH‬ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ .(CB-5AH‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬
‫‪١٤١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﺎﺡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ NiMH‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ AA‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪(NiMH NB4-300‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪.CBK4-200‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪High-Power Flash HF-DC2‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.High-Power Flash HF-DC1‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪AVC-DC400 (AV‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ‬
‫‪SELPHY‬‬
‫‪١٤٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﻓﺜﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺧﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺷﻴﺌﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (PAL‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.3‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪) ACK-DC90 AC‬ﻳُﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٧‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻠﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺨﻠﺼﻚ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ ACK800 AC‬ﻭﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪DR-DC10‬‬
‫)ﻳﺒﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻼﻥ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٩‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ) (‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ) (‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٤٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺑﻐﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺗﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪١٤٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺹ ‪.١٤٢‬‬
‫‪١٤٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٨‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء ‪١‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥١‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٢‬‬
‫‪١٥٠‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪.qrop‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪op‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٩‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻤﻜ ًﻨﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻧﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﻃﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥١‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٥٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٥٠‬ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ‪.L‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣٠ × ٩٠‬ﻣﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٥٢‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ،qr‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٥١‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٣‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ١٤٨‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،c‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪ .m‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﻥ ]ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ[ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ CP720‬ﻭ‪ CP730‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٧‬ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺆﻛﺪ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪.(DPOF‬‬
‫‪١٥٤‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ .2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎء ‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ]ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻴﻤﻨﻌﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺱ[ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ٍ‬
‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،3‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) n‬ﺹ ‪.(٢١‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺗُﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،2‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ op‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩‬ﻧﺴﺨﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،١٥٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،١٥٦‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪،(١٥٧ – ١٥٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ op‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻃﺒﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪m‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ً‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ ،1‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ImageBrowser EX‬ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ m‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،١٥٨‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺹ ‪ ،١٥٨‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪١٥٩‬‬
١٦٠
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪١٦١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﻘﺪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺆ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٩‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻄﻦ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻄﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗُﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ً‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ً‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺘﻔﺨﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺨﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺘﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٢٧‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻳﺴﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪ h‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS A3400 IS A4000 IS‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ[ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]ﻧﻤﻂ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٧‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.((٣٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٥ ،١٠١‬‬
‫‪١٦٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺇﻻﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) h‬ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥ ،٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٢ ،٩١‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! )ﺹ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٢ ،٩١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.((٣٨‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.((٣٨‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ! )ﺹ ‪.(٦٦‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٣‬‬
‫ﱡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪.(٦٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ )ﺹ ‪ (٧٢‬ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪ (٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ؛‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻞ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺮﺏ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٦‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻐﺮﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪“FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻭ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ“ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٩ – ١٧٢‬‬
‫‪١٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﺘﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٠‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.((٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﻴﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.ImageBrowser EX‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٣‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ٍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ o‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.m‬‬
‫‪١٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺠﺐ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD/SDHC/SDXC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ!‬
‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٣‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (٨٩ ،٧٣ ،٥٣‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٢٦ – ١٢٤‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٢‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ“ )ﺹ ‪.((٣٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪/(١٧‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١٩‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻤﻲ! )ﺹ ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪/‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪AVI/RAW‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ!‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﻪ‪/‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ )*( ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ* )ﺹ ‪ (١١٩‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٣‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ* )ﺹ ‪ (١٢٦ – ١٢٤‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ* )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٤‬ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ* )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺣﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‬
‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٥٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪ ٩٩٨‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ١،٠٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ!‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ ،(9999‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻌﺬ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )ﺹ ‪ (١٣٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻠﻮءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ(‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻛﻤﻞ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٢ ١٣‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪٩ ١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢٩‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٣٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٢١ ٢٢ ٢٣ ٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ*‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫‪) Drive mode‬ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻄﺎﺭ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫‪٢٦‬‬
‫‪٢٥‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٨‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(١٠٥‬ﺭﻣﺰ ﻧﻤﻂ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪(٦١‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٩٨‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪AF‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧٢‬ﺭﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺹ ‪(٥٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٦ ،٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫‪ ٢١‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫‪ ٢٢‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AE‬ﺹ ‪ ،(٩١‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٧‬‬
‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪ ٢٤‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫‪ ٢٥‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٢٦‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٥٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ً‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ؛ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٦٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ٍ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ٍ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫]ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪[.‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺬﺭﻙ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫]ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١٦٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪٩ ١٠‬‬
‫‪٧ ٨‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪١١‬‬
‫‪١٢‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١٤‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ ‪(١١٤ ،٥٩‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٢‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١١٦‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫‪٢٠ ٢١‬‬
‫‪١٧ ١٨ ١٩‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ – ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٦‬‬
‫‪ ١٤‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫‪١٥‬‬
‫‪١٦‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢١‬‬
‫‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪) MOV ،(٦٨‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٦ – ١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٦ ،٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٢٥ ،٩٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٢١‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٩‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺹ ‪.(١٤٣‬‬
‫‪١٧٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺨﺺ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ“ )ﺹ ‪(١١٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ qr‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ* )ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(.m‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ )ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(.m‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(.m‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* )ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(.m‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺹ ‪.(١٤٨‬‬
‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬
‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪.qr‬‬
‫‪١٧١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٦ ،٦٦‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫!‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪/AE‬ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) FE‬ﺹ ‪*(١٠٧ ،٩١‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪*(١٠١‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪u e‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪*(١٠٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪*(٦٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A810 ،PowerShot A1300 ،PowerShot A2300 ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ‪FE‬‬
‫ً‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A810 ،PowerShot A1300 ،PowerShot A2300 ،PowerShot A2400 IS ،PowerShot A4000 IS ٥‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A3400 IS ٦‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ ٧‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٨‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A1300 ٩‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪١٧٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٩٠‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Drive‬ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫] [ ‪$‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ*‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ*‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٦٨‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A810 ،PowerShot A1300 ،PowerShot A2300 ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻏﺎﻣﻖ — ﻓﺎﺗﺢ[ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﺝ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٧‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٦‬ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٨‬‬
‫‪١٧٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪*AiAF‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪*AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ*‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٨‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺹ ‪*(٦٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ*‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺡ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٦٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٩٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٩٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﻘﻴﻴﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ )ﺹ ‪(٧٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ 10 – 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٩‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٧١‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A810 ،PowerShot A1300 ،PowerShot A2300 ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A810 ،PowerShot A1300 ،PowerShot A2300 ،PowerShot A2400 IS ،PowerShot A4000 IS ٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A3400 IS ٤‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬
‫*‪] ٦‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪.A‬‬
‫‪١٧٦‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ )ﺹ ‪(١١٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺹ ‪(٦٧‬‬
‫—‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) IS‬ﺹ ‪*(١١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A810 ،PowerShot A1300 ،PowerShot A2300 ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫*‪ PowerShot A2400 IS ،PowerShot A3400 IS ،PowerShot A4000 IS ٢‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪١٧٨‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫*‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪t‬‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ — .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٧٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٥ ،٤٦‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٤٤‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣١‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٦‬‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٣ ،١٣٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٣٧‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٤‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٢٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٨‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١١٥‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫—‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٧‬‬
‫‪١٨٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٧‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺹ ‪١٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻕ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻨﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﺗﺐ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺛﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻜﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻜﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4000 IS‬‬
‫‪A3400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2400 IS‬‬
‫‪A2300‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪A1300‬‬
‫‪A810‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١٨١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٠٤ ...................................................‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪٩٩ ................................. (AF‬‬
‫‪١٥٤ ....................................................... DPOF‬‬
‫‪٩٦ .................................................mode Drive‬‬
‫‪ IS‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌّﺎﻟﺔ‪١١١ ......................................................‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ‪٩٨ ........................................‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٩٠ ..............................................‬‬
‫‪١٤٨ ،١٤٢ .........................................PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺃ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪١٦٢ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪١٣٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٥ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٩٩ ،٥٥ ،٢٥ .........................................AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪١٣٧ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥٨ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪٦٥ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٨٦ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪٨٨ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪٧٠ ...................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٥ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١١٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪٣٢ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪٣١ ........................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٢ .........DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٩٠ ..................................................... AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪١٤١ ،١٩ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪١٦٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪١٤١ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪١٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪١٦٩ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪٣ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٠٣ ....................................................‬‬
‫‪١٨٢‬‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺒﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٨٣ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٩ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻐﺮ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٨٠ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ‪١٢٥ ،٩٤ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪١٠١ ....................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪١٢٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪١٢٦ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٢٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٧٦ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪١٢٣ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪١٣٤ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٠٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪٩٩ ..............................................AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪١٠٣ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪١٠٨ ........................................ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٥ .................................................AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪١٢٦ ،٦٩ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٩٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٦٨ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٢٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‪٧١ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪٦٢ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٦٢ ،٥٤ ،٢٤ .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪٩٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪٩٦ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٤٦ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٥ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٢١ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ‪١١٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ‪٩٠ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩١ ...................................................AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٧ ................................................ FE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ )ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪٦٨ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ‪١١٨ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٤٣ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪١٢٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ‪٢٣ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﻜﺒﱠﺮ‪١١٩ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻄﻲ ‪١١٨ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪١٤٣ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪١٢٠ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪١١٧ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪٢٧ .....................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﻜﺒﱠﺮ ‪١١٩ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪١٦٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٨ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ‪١٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٩٣ .................................................... ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٤٠ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪١٤٠ ،٢ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‪٦٨ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪١٧٠ ،١٦٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪٢٣ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٨٤ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪١٢١ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪١٢٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٧٢ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪،‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪١٤٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪١٤١ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪١٤٤ .............................‬‬
‫ﻃﺎﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪١٤٦ ،١٤٤ ،١٤١ .............................. AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٤٨ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪٩٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﻟﻲ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ‪٧٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪١٠٦ ،٦٦ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﻲء‪١٠٦ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪١٠٦ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪١٧٤ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٥٠ ................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ‪١٧٢ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٥١ ................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺹ ‪٢ ......... DIGITAL CAMERA Solution Disk‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪٩١ ......................................................... AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٥ ........................................................AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ‪١٠٧ ....................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪١٠١ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪١٣٧ ........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٤٣ .................................. AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪١٤٨ ،٢ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻻﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪٩٨ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪٢٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٥ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪١٥ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪٩٥ ..........................................‬‬
‫‪١٨٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‪٢ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٢٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪١٢٢ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٧٢ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪١٣٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪٤٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪١٤٠ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪٥٢ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪٦٣ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٦٤ .................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ‪٦٤ ..................................‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫‪٩٨ .................................................. Macro‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪٩٨ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ‪) AUTO‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪٥٤ ،٢٤ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪١٤٨ ،١٤٧ ،١٤٥ ،١٤٣ .........................‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ )ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ‪١٠٠ ...................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪١٤٥ ،١٤١ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ‪٦٧ ............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪٢١ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪٢٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫‪١٨٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
ً ‫ ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ‬.‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
.‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
.SD-3C, LLC. ‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬SDXC ‫• ﻳﻌﺪ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
.‫ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺑﻪ‬Microsoft ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺼﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬exFAT ‫• ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
.Apple Inc. ‫ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ‬iFrame ‫ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ‬iFrame ‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬
MPEG-4 ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬
• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding
MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and
non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the
AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted
or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
.‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
١٨٥
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻃﺒﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ً‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪CEL-SS3XA2N0‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2012‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising